linux/include/net/mac80211.h
<<
>>
Prefs
   1/* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
   2/*
   3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
   4 *
   5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
   6 * Copyright 2006-2007  Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
   7 * Copyright 2007-2010  Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
   8 * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
   9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
  10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
  11 */
  12
  13#ifndef MAC80211_H
  14#define MAC80211_H
  15
  16#include <linux/bug.h>
  17#include <linux/kernel.h>
  18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
  19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
  20#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
  21#include <net/cfg80211.h>
  22#include <net/codel.h>
  23#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
  24#include <asm/unaligned.h>
  25
  26/**
  27 * DOC: Introduction
  28 *
  29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
  30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
  31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
  32 * drivers.
  33 */
  34
  35/**
  36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
  37 *
  38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
  39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
  40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
  41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
  42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
  43 * tasklet function.
  44 *
  45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
  46 *       use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
  47 */
  48
  49/**
  50 * DOC: Warning
  51 *
  52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
  53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
  54 */
  55
  56/**
  57 * DOC: Frame format
  58 *
  59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
  60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
  61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
  62 * hardware.
  63 *
  64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
  65 *
  66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
  67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
  68 *
  69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
  70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
  71 */
  72
  73/**
  74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
  75 *
  76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
  77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
  78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
  79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
  80 *
  81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
  82 * suspend.
  83 *
  84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
  85 *
  86 */
  87
  88/**
  89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
  90 *
  91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
  92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
  93 * between different stations/interfaces.
  94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
  95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
  96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
  97 *
  98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
  99 * driver operation.
 100 *
 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
 104 *
 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
 107 *
 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
 111 *
 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
 116 * ieee80211_return_txq().
 117 *
 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
 122 * .release_buffered_frames().
 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
 126 */
 127
 128struct device;
 129
 130/**
 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
 132 *
 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
 135 */
 136enum ieee80211_max_queues {
 137        IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =          16,
 138        IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =       BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
 139};
 140
 141#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE        0xff
 142
 143/**
 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
 149 */
 150enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
 151        IEEE80211_AC_VO         = 0,
 152        IEEE80211_AC_VI         = 1,
 153        IEEE80211_AC_BE         = 2,
 154        IEEE80211_AC_BK         = 3,
 155};
 156
 157/**
 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
 159 *
 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
 162 *
 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
 165 *      2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
 172 */
 173struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
 174        u16 txop;
 175        u16 cw_min;
 176        u16 cw_max;
 177        u8 aifs;
 178        bool acm;
 179        bool uapsd;
 180        bool mu_edca;
 181        struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
 182};
 183
 184struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
 185        unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
 186        unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
 187        unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
 188        unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
 189};
 190
 191/**
 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
 197 *      this is used only with channel switching with CSA
 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
 199 */
 200enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
 201        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH          = BIT(0),
 202        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS      = BIT(1),
 203        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR          = BIT(2),
 204        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL        = BIT(3),
 205        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH      = BIT(4),
 206};
 207
 208/**
 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
 210 *
 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
 213 *
 214 * @def: the channel definition
 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
 217 *      active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
 219 *      after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
 220 *      this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
 223 *      sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
 224 */
 225struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
 226        struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
 227        struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
 228
 229        u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
 230
 231        bool radar_enabled;
 232
 233        u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
 234};
 235
 236/**
 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
 239 *      exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
 240 *      needs to be switched from one to the other.
 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
 242 *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
 243 *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
 244 *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
 245 *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
 246 *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
 247 *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
 248 *      for changes/removal.)
 249 */
 250enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
 251        CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
 252        CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
 253};
 254
 255/**
 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
 257 *
 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
 261 * done.
 262 *
 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
 264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
 265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
 266 */
 267struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
 268        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
 269        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
 270        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
 271};
 272
 273/**
 274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
 275 *
 276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
 277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
 278 *
 279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
 280 *      also implies a change in the AID.
 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
 282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
 288 *      reason (IBSS and managed mode)
 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
 290 *      new beacon (beaconing modes)
 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
 292 *      enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
 294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
 297 *      that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
 304 *      changed
 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
 306 *      currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
 308 *      note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
 309 *      context had been assigned.
 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
 313 *      keep alive) changed.
 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
 316 *      functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
 318 *
 319 */
 320enum ieee80211_bss_change {
 321        BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC               = 1<<0,
 322        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT        = 1<<1,
 323        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE        = 1<<2,
 324        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT            = 1<<3,
 325        BSS_CHANGED_HT                  = 1<<4,
 326        BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES         = 1<<5,
 327        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT          = 1<<6,
 328        BSS_CHANGED_BSSID               = 1<<7,
 329        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON              = 1<<8,
 330        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED      = 1<<9,
 331        BSS_CHANGED_CQM                 = 1<<10,
 332        BSS_CHANGED_IBSS                = 1<<11,
 333        BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER          = 1<<12,
 334        BSS_CHANGED_QOS                 = 1<<13,
 335        BSS_CHANGED_IDLE                = 1<<14,
 336        BSS_CHANGED_SSID                = 1<<15,
 337        BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP       = 1<<16,
 338        BSS_CHANGED_PS                  = 1<<17,
 339        BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER             = 1<<18,
 340        BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS              = 1<<19,
 341        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO         = 1<<20,
 342        BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH           = 1<<21,
 343        BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
 344        BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS           = 1<<23,
 345        BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE          = 1<<24,
 346        BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE          = 1<<25,
 347        BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER       = 1<<26,
 348        BSS_CHANGED_TWT                 = 1<<27,
 349
 350        /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
 351};
 352
 353/*
 354 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
 355 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
 356 * filtering will be disabled.
 357 */
 358#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
 359
 360/**
 361 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
 362 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
 363 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
 364 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
 365 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
 366 *      they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
 367 *      once each time the timeout triggers.
 368 */
 369enum ieee80211_event_type {
 370        RSSI_EVENT,
 371        MLME_EVENT,
 372        BAR_RX_EVENT,
 373        BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
 374};
 375
 376/**
 377 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
 378 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
 379 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
 380 */
 381enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
 382        RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
 383        RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
 384};
 385
 386/**
 387 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
 388 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
 389 */
 390struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
 391        enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
 392};
 393
 394/**
 395 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 396 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
 397 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
 398 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
 399 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
 400 */
 401enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
 402        AUTH_EVENT,
 403        ASSOC_EVENT,
 404        DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
 405        DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
 406};
 407
 408/**
 409 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 410 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
 411 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
 412 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
 413 */
 414enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
 415        MLME_SUCCESS,
 416        MLME_DENIED,
 417        MLME_TIMEOUT,
 418};
 419
 420/**
 421 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
 422 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
 423 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
 424 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
 425 */
 426struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
 427        enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
 428        enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
 429        u16 reason;
 430};
 431
 432/**
 433 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
 434 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
 435 * @tid: the tid
 436 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
 437 */
 438struct ieee80211_ba_event {
 439        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
 440        u16 tid;
 441        u16 ssn;
 442};
 443
 444/**
 445 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
 446 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
 447 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
 448 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
 449 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
 450 * @u:union holding the fields above
 451 */
 452struct ieee80211_event {
 453        enum ieee80211_event_type type;
 454        union {
 455                struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
 456                struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
 457                struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
 458        } u;
 459};
 460
 461/**
 462 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
 463 *
 464 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
 465 *
 466 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
 467 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
 468 */
 469struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
 470        u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
 471        u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
 472};
 473
 474/**
 475 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
 476 *
 477 * @lci: LCI subelement content
 478 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
 479 * @lci_len: LCI data length
 480 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
 481 */
 482struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
 483        const u8 *lci;
 484        const u8 *civicloc;
 485        size_t lci_len;
 486        size_t civicloc_len;
 487};
 488
 489/**
 490 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
 491 *
 492 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
 493 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
 494 *
 495 * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
 496 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
 497 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
 498 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
 499 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
 500 *      ACK, BACK or both
 501 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
 502 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
 503 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
 504 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 505 *      mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
 506 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 507 *      mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
 508 * @assoc: association status
 509 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
 510 *      or not
 511 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
 512 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
 513 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
 514 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
 515 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
 516 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
 517 *      valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
 518 *      with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
 519 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
 520 *      as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
 521 *      HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
 522 *      only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
 523 *      association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
 524 *      %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
 525 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
 526 *      the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
 527 *      (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
 528 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
 529 *      is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
 530 *      IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
 531 *      by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
 532 *      guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
 533 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
 534 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
 535 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
 536 *      index into the rate table configured by the driver in
 537 *      the current band.
 538 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
 539 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
 540 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
 541 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
 542 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
 543 *      configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
 544 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
 545 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
 546 *      This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
 547 *      Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
 548 *      be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
 549 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
 550 *      implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
 551 *      cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
 552 *      relation to the newly configured threshold.
 553 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
 554 *      implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
 555 *      threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
 556 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
 557 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
 558 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
 559 *      may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
 560 *      The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
 561 *      to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
 562 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
 563 *      may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
 564 *      array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
 565 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
 566 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
 567 *      hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
 568 *      your driver/device needs to do.
 569 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
 570 *      offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
 571 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
 572 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
 573 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
 574 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
 575 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
 576 *      Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
 577 *      TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
 578 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
 579 *      userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
 580 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
 581 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
 582 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
 583 *      to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
 584 *      if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
 585 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
 586 *      transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
 587 *      In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
 588 *      a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
 589 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
 590 *      protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
 591 *      station.
 592 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
 593 *      responder functionality.
 594 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
 595 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
 596 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
 597 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
 598 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
 599 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
 600 *      nontransmitted BSSIDs
 601 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
 602 *      in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
 603 */
 604struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
 605        const u8 *bssid;
 606        u8 bss_color;
 607        u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
 608        bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
 609        bool uora_exists;
 610        bool ack_enabled;
 611        u8 uora_ocw_range;
 612        u16 frame_time_rts_th;
 613        bool he_support;
 614        bool twt_requester;
 615        bool twt_responder;
 616        /* association related data */
 617        bool assoc, ibss_joined;
 618        bool ibss_creator;
 619        u16 aid;
 620        /* erp related data */
 621        bool use_cts_prot;
 622        bool use_short_preamble;
 623        bool use_short_slot;
 624        bool enable_beacon;
 625        u8 dtim_period;
 626        u16 beacon_int;
 627        u16 assoc_capability;
 628        u64 sync_tsf;
 629        u32 sync_device_ts;
 630        u8 sync_dtim_count;
 631        u32 basic_rates;
 632        struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
 633        int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
 634        u16 ht_operation_mode;
 635        s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
 636        u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
 637        s32 cqm_rssi_low;
 638        s32 cqm_rssi_high;
 639        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
 640        struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
 641        __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
 642        int arp_addr_cnt;
 643        bool qos;
 644        bool idle;
 645        bool ps;
 646        u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
 647        size_t ssid_len;
 648        bool hidden_ssid;
 649        int txpower;
 650        enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
 651        struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
 652        bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
 653        u16 max_idle_period;
 654        bool protected_keep_alive;
 655        bool ftm_responder;
 656        struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
 657        /* Multiple BSSID data */
 658        bool nontransmitted;
 659        u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
 660        u8 bssid_index;
 661        u8 bssid_indicator;
 662        bool ema_ap;
 663        u8 profile_periodicity;
 664};
 665
 666/**
 667 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
 668 *
 669 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
 670 *
 671 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
 672 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
 673 *      number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
 674 *      number and increasing the sequence number only when the
 675 *      IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
 676 *      assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
 677 *      for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
 678 *      that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
 679 *      If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
 680 *      assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
 681 *      802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
 682 *      beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
 683 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
 684 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
 685 *      station
 686 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
 687 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
 688 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
 689 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
 690 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
 691 *      because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
 692 *      avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
 693 *      firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
 694 *      went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
 695 *      the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
 696 *      that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
 697 *      since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
 698 *      hardware queue.
 699 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
 700 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
 701 *      is for the whole aggregation.
 702 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
 703 *      so consider using block ack request (BAR).
 704 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
 705 *      set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
 706 *      be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
 707 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
 708 *      that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
 709 *      off-channel operation.
 710 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
 711 *      used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
 712 *      it can be sent out.
 713 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
 714 *      used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
 715 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
 716 *      used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
 717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
 718 *      frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
 719 *      be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
 720 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
 721 *      transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
 722 *      by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
 723 *      queue gets full.
 724 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
 725 *      after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
 726 *      be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
 727 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
 728 *      code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
 729 *      should kick the MLME state machine.
 730 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
 731 *      MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
 732 *      status to user space)
 733 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
 734 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
 735 *      frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
 736 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
 737 *      the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
 738 *      in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
 739 *      handled properly by the device.
 740 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
 741 *      testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
 742 *      TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
 743 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
 744 *      This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
 745 *      frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
 746 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
 747 *      when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
 748 *      an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
 749 *      the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
 750 *      PS-Poll responses.
 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
 752 *      This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
 753 *      the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
 754 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
 755 *      would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
 756 *      monitor injection).
 757 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
 758 *      IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
 759 *      any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
 760 *      This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
 761 *      behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
 762 *
 763 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
 764 *       forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
 765 */
 766enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
 767        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS          = BIT(0),
 768        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ             = BIT(1),
 769        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK                 = BIT(2),
 770        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT          = BIT(3),
 771        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT         = BIT(4),
 772        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM        = BIT(5),
 773        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU                  = BIT(6),
 774        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED               = BIT(7),
 775        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED           = BIT(8),
 776        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK                   = BIT(9),
 777        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU                 = BIT(10),
 778        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK         = BIT(11),
 779        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE        = BIT(12),
 780        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK        = BIT(13),
 781        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING    = BIT(14),
 782        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED              = BIT(15),
 783        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT         = BIT(16),
 784        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER           = BIT(17),
 785        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES            = BIT(18),
 786        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION       = BIT(19),
 787        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX         = BIT(20),
 788        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX     = BIT(21),
 789        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC                   = BIT(22),
 790        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC                   = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
 791        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN             = BIT(25),
 792        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE     = BIT(26),
 793        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE            = BIT(27),
 794        IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP                = BIT(28),
 795        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE            = BIT(29),
 796        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG               = BIT(30),
 797        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED     = BIT(31),
 798};
 799
 800#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT             23
 801
 802/**
 803 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
 804 *
 805 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
 806 *      protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
 807 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
 808 *      frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
 809 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
 810 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
 811 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
 812 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
 813 *
 814 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
 815 */
 816enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
 817        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO       = BIT(0),
 818        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE           = BIT(1),
 819        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT           = BIT(2),
 820        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU                 = BIT(3),
 821        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT             = BIT(4),
 822        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP     = BIT(5),
 823};
 824
 825/*
 826 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
 827 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
 828 */
 829#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |               \
 830        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
 831        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |           \
 832        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |               \
 833        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |           \
 834        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
 835        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |                \
 836        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
 837
 838/**
 839 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
 840 *      Rate Control algorithm.
 841 *
 842 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
 843 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
 844 *
 845 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
 846 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
 847 *      This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
 848 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
 849 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
 850 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
 851 *      into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
 852 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
 853 *      Greenfield mode.
 854 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
 855 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
 856 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
 857 *      (80+80 isn't supported yet)
 858 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
 859 *      adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
 860 *      NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
 861 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
 862 */
 863enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
 864        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS             = BIT(0),
 865        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT         = BIT(1),
 866        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE      = BIT(2),
 867
 868        /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
 869        IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS                     = BIT(3),
 870        IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD             = BIT(4),
 871        IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH            = BIT(5),
 872        IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA                = BIT(6),
 873        IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI                = BIT(7),
 874        IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS                 = BIT(8),
 875        IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH            = BIT(9),
 876        IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH           = BIT(10),
 877};
 878
 879
 880/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
 881#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
 882
 883/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
 884#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
 885
 886/* maximum number of rate stages */
 887#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES  4
 888
 889/* maximum number of rate table entries */
 890#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE    4
 891
 892/**
 893 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
 894 *
 895 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
 896 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
 897 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
 898 *
 899 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
 900 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
 901 *
 902 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
 903 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
 904 *
 905 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
 906 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
 907 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
 908 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
 909 * information::
 910 *
 911 *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
 912 *
 913 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
 914 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
 915 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
 916 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
 917 * information should then contain::
 918 *
 919 *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
 920 *
 921 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
 922 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
 923 */
 924struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
 925        s8 idx;
 926        u16 count:5,
 927            flags:11;
 928} __packed;
 929
 930#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY          31
 931
 932static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
 933                                          u8 mcs, u8 nss)
 934{
 935        WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
 936        WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
 937        rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
 938}
 939
 940static inline u8
 941ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
 942{
 943        return rate->idx & 0xF;
 944}
 945
 946static inline u8
 947ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
 948{
 949        return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
 950}
 951
 952/**
 953 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
 954 *
 955 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
 956 *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
 957 *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
 958 *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
 959 *
 960 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
 961 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
 962 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
 963 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
 964 * @control: union part for control data
 965 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
 966 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
 967 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
 968 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
 969 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
 970 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
 971 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
 972 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
 973 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
 974 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
 975 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
 976 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
 977 * @pad: padding
 978 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
 979 * @status: union part for status data
 980 * @status.rates: attempted rates
 981 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
 982 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
 983 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
 984 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
 985 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
 986 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
 987 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
 988 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
 989 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
 990 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
 991 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
 992 *      relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
 993 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
 994 *      relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
 995 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
 996 */
 997struct ieee80211_tx_info {
 998        /* common information */
 999        u32 flags;
1000        u8 band;
1001
1002        u8 hw_queue;
1003
1004        u16 ack_frame_id;
1005
1006        union {
1007                struct {
1008                        union {
1009                                /* rate control */
1010                                struct {
1011                                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1012                                                IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1013                                        s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1014                                        u8 use_rts:1;
1015                                        u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1016                                        u8 short_preamble:1;
1017                                        u8 skip_table:1;
1018                                        /* 2 bytes free */
1019                                };
1020                                /* only needed before rate control */
1021                                unsigned long jiffies;
1022                        };
1023                        /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1024                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1025                        struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1026                        u32 flags;
1027                        codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1028                } control;
1029                struct {
1030                        u64 cookie;
1031                } ack;
1032                struct {
1033                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1034                        s32 ack_signal;
1035                        u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1036                        u8 ampdu_len;
1037                        u8 antenna;
1038                        u16 tx_time;
1039                        bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1040                        void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1041                } status;
1042                struct {
1043                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1044                                IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1045                        u8 pad[4];
1046
1047                        void *rate_driver_data[
1048                                IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1049                };
1050                void *driver_data[
1051                        IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1052        };
1053};
1054
1055/**
1056 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1057 *
1058 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1059 * @info: Basic tx status information
1060 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1061 */
1062struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1063        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1064        struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1065        struct sk_buff *skb;
1066};
1067
1068/**
1069 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1070 *
1071 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1072 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1073 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1074 *
1075 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1076 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1077 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1078 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1079 */
1080struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1081        const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1082        size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1083        const u8 *common_ies;
1084        size_t common_ie_len;
1085};
1086
1087
1088static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1089{
1090        return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1091}
1092
1093static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1094{
1095        return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1096}
1097
1098/**
1099 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1100 *
1101 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1102 *
1103 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1104 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1105 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1106 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1107 *
1108 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1109 *       info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1110 *       instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1111 */
1112static inline void
1113ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1114{
1115        int i;
1116
1117        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1118                     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1119        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1120                     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1121        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1122        /* clear the rate counts */
1123        for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1124                info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1125
1126        BUILD_BUG_ON(
1127            offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1128        memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1129               sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1130               offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1131}
1132
1133
1134/**
1135 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1136 *
1137 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1138 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1139 *      Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1140 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1141 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1142 *      verification has been done by the hardware.
1143 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1144 *      If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1145 *      hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1146 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1147 *      flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1148 *      Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1149 *      is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1150 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1151 *      de-duplication by itself.
1152 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1153 *      the frame.
1154 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1155 *      the frame.
1156 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1157 *      field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1158 *      was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1159 *      merging.
1160 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1161 *      field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1162 *      (including FCS) was received.
1163 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1164 *      field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1165 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1166 *      Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1167 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1168 *      number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1169 *      each A-MPDU
1170 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1171 *      subframes of a single A-MPDU
1172 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1173 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1174 *      on this subframe
1175 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1176 *      is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1177 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1178 *      done by the hardware
1179 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1180 *      processing it in any regular way.
1181 *      This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1182 *      them for sniffing purposes.
1183 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1184 *      monitor interfaces.
1185 *      This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1186 *      them for sniffing purposes.
1187 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1188 *      subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1189 *      All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1190 *      if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1191 *      the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1192 *      deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1193 *      subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1194 *      either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1195 *      interleaved with other frames.
1196 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1197 *      radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1198 *      the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1199 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1200 *      This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1201 *      the first subframe.
1202 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1203 *      be done in the hardware.
1204 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1205 *      frame
1206 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1207 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1208 *      (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1209 *      
1210 *       - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1211 *       - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1212 *       - DATA3_CODING
1213 *       - DATA5_GI
1214 *       - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1215 *       - DATA6_NSTS
1216 *       - DATA3_STBC
1217 *      
1218 *      from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1219 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1220 *      (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1221 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1222 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1223 *      the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1224 *      in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1225 *      known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1226 */
1227enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1228        RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR              = BIT(0),
1229        RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED               = BIT(1),
1230        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START      = BIT(2),
1231        RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED           = BIT(3),
1232        RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED             = BIT(4),
1233        RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC          = BIT(5),
1234        RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC         = BIT(6),
1235        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START           = BIT(7),
1236        RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL           = BIT(8),
1237        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS           = BIT(9),
1238        RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED            = BIT(10),
1239        RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED           = BIT(11),
1240        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN        = BIT(12),
1241        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST           = BIT(13),
1242        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR   = BIT(14),
1243        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN   = BIT(15),
1244        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END             = BIT(16),
1245        RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR            = BIT(17),
1246        RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR            = BIT(18),
1247        RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE              = BIT(19),
1248        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA    = BIT(20),
1249        RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED            = BIT(21),
1250        RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN           = BIT(22),
1251        RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED            = BIT(23),
1252        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT           = BIT(24),
1253        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN     = BIT(25),
1254        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE             = BIT(26),
1255        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU          = BIT(27),
1256        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG           = BIT(28),
1257        RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU                 = BIT(29),
1258};
1259
1260/**
1261 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1262 *
1263 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1264 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1265 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1266 *      if the driver fills this value it should add
1267 *      %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1268 *      to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1269 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1270 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1271 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1272 */
1273enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1274        RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE            = BIT(0),
1275        RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI            = BIT(2),
1276        RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF               = BIT(3),
1277        RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK           = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1278        RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC                = BIT(6),
1279        RX_ENC_FLAG_BF                  = BIT(7),
1280};
1281
1282#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT          4
1283
1284enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1285        RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1286        RX_ENC_HT,
1287        RX_ENC_VHT,
1288        RX_ENC_HE,
1289};
1290
1291/**
1292 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1293 *
1294 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1295 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1296 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1297 *
1298 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1299 *      (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1300 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1301 *      needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1302 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1303 *      it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1304 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1305 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1306 *      This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1307 *      for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1308 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1309 *      unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1310 *      @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1311 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1312 *      values were filled.
1313 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1314 *      support dB or unspecified units)
1315 * @antenna: antenna used
1316 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1317 *      HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1318 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1319 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1320 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1321 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1322 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1323 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1324 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1325 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1326 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1327 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1328 *      each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1329 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1330 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1331 */
1332struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1333        u64 mactime;
1334        u64 boottime_ns;
1335        u32 device_timestamp;
1336        u32 ampdu_reference;
1337        u32 flag;
1338        u16 freq;
1339        u8 enc_flags;
1340        u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1341        u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1342        u8 rate_idx;
1343        u8 nss;
1344        u8 rx_flags;
1345        u8 band;
1346        u8 antenna;
1347        s8 signal;
1348        u8 chains;
1349        s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1350        u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1351        u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1352};
1353
1354/**
1355 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1356 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1357 *      (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1358 *       bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1359 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1360 *      alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1361 *      description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1362 *      Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1363 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1364 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1365 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1366 *      then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1367 *      @data field.
1368 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1369 *      the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1370 *      length
1371 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1372 *
1373 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1374 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1375 * data.
1376 */
1377struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1378        u32 present;
1379        u8 align;
1380        u8 oui[3];
1381        u8 subns;
1382        u8 pad;
1383        u16 len;
1384        u8 data[];
1385} __packed;
1386
1387/**
1388 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1389 *
1390 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1391 *
1392 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1393 *      to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1394 *      or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1395 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1396 *      This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1397 *      meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1398 *      transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1399 *      Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1400 *      driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1401 *      for more.
1402 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1403 *      the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1404 *      may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1405 *      be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1406 *      it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1407 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1408 *      operating channel.
1409 */
1410enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1411        IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR          = (1<<0),
1412        IEEE80211_CONF_PS               = (1<<1),
1413        IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE             = (1<<2),
1414        IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL       = (1<<3),
1415};
1416
1417
1418/**
1419 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1420 *
1421 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1422 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1423 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1424 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1425 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1426 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1427 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1428 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1429 *      Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1430 *      otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1431 */
1432enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1433        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS              = BIT(1),
1434        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL   = BIT(2),
1435        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR           = BIT(3),
1436        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS                = BIT(4),
1437        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER             = BIT(5),
1438        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL           = BIT(6),
1439        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS      = BIT(7),
1440        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE              = BIT(8),
1441};
1442
1443/**
1444 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1445 *
1446 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1447 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1448 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1449 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1450 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1451 */
1452enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1453        IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1454        IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1455        IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1456        IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1457
1458        /* keep last */
1459        IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1460};
1461
1462/**
1463 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1464 *
1465 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1466 *
1467 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1468 *
1469 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1470 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1471 *      in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1472 *      has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1473 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1474 *      powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1475 *      the CONF_PS flag is set.
1476 *
1477 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1478 *      value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1479 *
1480 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1481 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1482 *
1483 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1484 *      (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1485 *      but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1486 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1487 *      frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1488 *      number of transmissions not the number of retries
1489 *
1490 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1491 *      %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1492 *      configured for an HT channel.
1493 *      Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1494 *      otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1495 */
1496struct ieee80211_conf {
1497        u32 flags;
1498        int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1499
1500        u16 listen_interval;
1501        u8 ps_dtim_period;
1502
1503        u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1504
1505        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1506        bool radar_enabled;
1507        enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1508};
1509
1510/**
1511 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1512 *
1513 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1514 * operation.
1515 *
1516 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1517 *      Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1518 *      announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1519 *      the driver passed into mac80211.
1520 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1521 *      rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1522 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1523 *      scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1524 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1525 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1526 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1527  *     current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1528  *     channel, expressed in TU.
1529 */
1530struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1531        u64 timestamp;
1532        u32 device_timestamp;
1533        bool block_tx;
1534        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1535        u8 count;
1536        u32 delay;
1537};
1538
1539/**
1540 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1541 *
1542 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1543 *      on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1544 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1545 *      monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1546 *      connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1547 *      provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1548 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1549 *      interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1550 *      but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1551 *      only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1552 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1553 *      and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1554 *      this is not pure P2P vif.
1555 */
1556enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1557        IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER             = BIT(0),
1558        IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI         = BIT(1),
1559        IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD            = BIT(2),
1560        IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE            = BIT(3),
1561};
1562
1563/**
1564 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1565 *
1566 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1567 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1568 *
1569 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1570 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1571 *      or the BSS we're associated to
1572 * @addr: address of this interface
1573 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1574 *      interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1575 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1576 *      write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1577 *      for read access.
1578 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1579 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1580 *      these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1581 *      or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1582 *      at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1583 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1584 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1585 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1586 *      when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1587 *      path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1588 *      be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1589 *      processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1590 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1591 *      interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1592 *      monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1593 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1594 *      interface.
1595 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1596 *      sizeof(void \*).
1597 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1598 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1599 *      protected by fq->lock.
1600 */
1601struct ieee80211_vif {
1602        enum nl80211_iftype type;
1603        struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1604        u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1605        bool p2p;
1606        bool csa_active;
1607        bool mu_mimo_owner;
1608
1609        u8 cab_queue;
1610        u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1611
1612        struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1613
1614        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1615
1616        u32 driver_flags;
1617
1618#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1619        struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1620#endif
1621
1622        unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1623
1624        bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1625
1626        /* must be last */
1627        u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1628};
1629
1630static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1631{
1632#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1633        return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1634#endif
1635        return false;
1636}
1637
1638/**
1639 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1640 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1641 *
1642 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1643 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1644 *
1645 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1646 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1647 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1648 */
1649struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1650
1651/**
1652 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1653 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1654 *
1655 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1656 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1657 *
1658 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1659 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1660 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1661 */
1662struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1663
1664/**
1665 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1666 *
1667 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1668 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1669 *
1670 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1671 *      driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1672 *      particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1673 *      will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1674 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1675 *      the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1676 *      generation in software.
1677 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1678 *      that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1679 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1680 *      CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1681 *      (MFP) to be done in software.
1682 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1683 *      if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1684 *      itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1685 *      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1686 *      not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1687 *      MIC.
1688 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1689 *      management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1690 *      crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1691 *      properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1692 *      fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1693 *      RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1694 *      %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1695 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1696 *      driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1697 *      only for managment frames (MFP).
1698 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1699 *      driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1700 *      be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1701 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1702 *      a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1703 *      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1704 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1705 */
1706enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1707        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT     = BIT(0),
1708        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV          = BIT(1),
1709        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC        = BIT(2),
1710        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE             = BIT(3),
1711        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX           = BIT(4),
1712        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE         = BIT(5),
1713        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT              = BIT(6),
1714        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM     = BIT(7),
1715        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE        = BIT(8),
1716        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX           = BIT(9),
1717};
1718
1719/**
1720 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1721 *
1722 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1723 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1724 *
1725 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1726 *      wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1727 *      encrypted in hardware.
1728 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1729 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1730 *      needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1731 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1732 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1733 * @keylen: key material length
1734 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1735 *      data block:
1736 *      - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1737 *      - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1738 *      - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1739 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1740 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1741 */
1742struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1743        atomic64_t tx_pn;
1744        u32 cipher;
1745        u8 icv_len;
1746        u8 iv_len;
1747        u8 hw_key_idx;
1748        s8 keyidx;
1749        u16 flags;
1750        u8 keylen;
1751        u8 key[0];
1752};
1753
1754#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN    16
1755
1756#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1757#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1758
1759/**
1760 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1761 *
1762 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1763 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1764 *      reverse order than in packet)
1765 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1766 *      reverse order than in packet)
1767 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1768 *      reverse order than in packet)
1769 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1770 *      reverse order than in packet)
1771 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1772 */
1773struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1774        union {
1775                struct {
1776                        u32 iv32;
1777                        u16 iv16;
1778                } tkip;
1779                struct {
1780                        u8 pn[6];
1781                } ccmp;
1782                struct {
1783                        u8 pn[6];
1784                } aes_cmac;
1785                struct {
1786                        u8 pn[6];
1787                } aes_gmac;
1788                struct {
1789                        u8 pn[6];
1790                } gcmp;
1791                struct {
1792                        u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1793                        u8 seq_len;
1794                } hw;
1795        };
1796};
1797
1798/**
1799 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1800 *
1801 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1802 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1803 *
1804 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1805 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1806 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1807 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1808 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1809 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1810 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1811 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1812 *     key_idx value calculation:
1813 *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1814 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1815 */
1816struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1817        u32 cipher;
1818        u16 iftype;
1819        u8 hdr_len;
1820        u8 pn_len;
1821        u8 pn_off;
1822        u8 key_idx_off;
1823        u8 key_idx_mask;
1824        u8 key_idx_shift;
1825        u8 mic_len;
1826};
1827
1828/**
1829 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1830 *
1831 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1832 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1833 *
1834 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1835 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1836 */
1837enum set_key_cmd {
1838        SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1839};
1840
1841/**
1842 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1843 *
1844 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1845 *      this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1846 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1847 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1848 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1849 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1850 */
1851enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1852        /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1853        IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1854        IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1855        IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1856        IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1857        IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1858};
1859
1860/**
1861 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1862 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1863 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1864 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1865 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1866 *      (including 80+80 MHz)
1867 *
1868 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1869 *      correctly, the values must be sorted.
1870 */
1871enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1872        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1873        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1874        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1875        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1876};
1877
1878/**
1879 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1880 *
1881 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1882 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1883 *      Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1884 */
1885struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1886        struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1887        struct {
1888                s8 idx;
1889                u8 count;
1890                u8 count_cts;
1891                u8 count_rts;
1892                u16 flags;
1893        } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1894};
1895
1896/**
1897 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1898 *
1899 * Used to configure txpower for station.
1900 *
1901 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1902 *      to the STA.
1903 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1904 *      will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1905 *      %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1906 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1907 *      per peer TPC.
1908 */
1909struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1910        s16 power;
1911        enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1912};
1913
1914/**
1915 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1916 *
1917 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1918 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1919 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1920 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1921 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1922 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1923 *
1924 * @addr: MAC address
1925 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1926 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1927 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1928 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1929 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1930 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1931 *      that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1932 *      Can be modified by driver.
1933 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1934 *      otherwise always false)
1935 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1936 *      sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1937 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1938 *      if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1939 *      IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1940 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1941 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1942 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1943 *      station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1944 *      notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1945 *      the station moves to associated state.
1946 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1947 * @rates: rate control selection table
1948 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1949 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1950 *      valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1951 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1952 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1953 *      A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1954 *      unlimited.
1955 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1956 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1957 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1958 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1959 *      the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1960 */
1961struct ieee80211_sta {
1962        u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1963        u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1964        u16 aid;
1965        struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1966        struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1967        struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1968        u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1969        bool wme;
1970        u8 uapsd_queues;
1971        u8 max_sp;
1972        u8 rx_nss;
1973        enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
1974        enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1975        struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
1976        bool tdls;
1977        bool tdls_initiator;
1978        bool mfp;
1979        u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1980
1981        /**
1982         * @max_amsdu_len:
1983         * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1984         * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1985         * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1986         *
1987         * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1988         *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1989         * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1990         *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1991         *
1992         * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1993         * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1994         * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1995         */
1996        u16 max_amsdu_len;
1997        bool support_p2p_ps;
1998        u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
1999        u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2000        struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2001
2002        struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2003
2004        /* must be last */
2005        u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2006};
2007
2008/**
2009 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2010 *
2011 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2012 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2013 *
2014 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2015 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2016 */
2017enum sta_notify_cmd {
2018        STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2019};
2020
2021/**
2022 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2023 *
2024 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2025 *      it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2026 */
2027struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2028        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2029};
2030
2031/**
2032 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2033 *
2034 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2035 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2036 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2037 *      %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2038 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2039 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2040 *
2041 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2042 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2043 */
2044struct ieee80211_txq {
2045        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2046        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2047        u8 tid;
2048        u8 ac;
2049
2050        /* must be last */
2051        u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2052};
2053
2054/**
2055 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2056 *
2057 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2058 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2059 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2060 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2061 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2062 *
2063 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2064 *      The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2065 *      controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2066 *      should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2067 *      will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2068 *      algorithm.
2069 *      Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2070 *      callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2071 *      the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2072 *      @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2073 *      timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2074 *      CCK frames.
2075 *
2076 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2077 *      Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2078 *      the FCS at the end.
2079 *
2080 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2081 *      Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2082 *      for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2083 *      rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2084 *      to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2085 *      multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2086 *      the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2087 *
2088 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2089 *      Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2090 *      expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2091 *      If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2092 *
2093 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2094 *      Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2095 *      one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2096 *      between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2097 *
2098 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2099 *      Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2100 *      Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2101 *
2102 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2103 *      Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2104 *
2105 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2106 *      Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2107 *
2108 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2109 *      Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2110 *      stack support for dynamic PS.
2111 *
2112 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2113 *      Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2114 *
2115 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2116 *      Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2117 *
2118 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2119 *      Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2120 *      the stack.
2121 *
2122 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2123 *      The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2124 *      periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2125 *
2126 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2127 *      This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2128 *      dtim_period).
2129 *
2130 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2131 *      per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2132 *      the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2133 *      to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2134 *      possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2135 *      only in that case.
2136 *
2137 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2138 *      autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2139 *      this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2140 *      stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2141 *      Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2142 *      the PS mode of connected stations.
2143 *
2144 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2145 *      setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2146 *      software.
2147 *
2148 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2149 *      a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2150 *      active interfaces.
2151 *
2152 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2153 *      be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2154 *      desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2155 *
2156 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2157 *      crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2158 *      try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2159 *      the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2160 *      supported cipher suites.
2161 *
2162 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2163 *      this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2164 *      for frames.
2165 *
2166 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2167 *      queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2168 *      for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2169 *      control for more details.
2170 *
2171 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2172 *      selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2173 *
2174 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2175 *      P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2176 *      is supported.
2177 *
2178 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2179 *      only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2180 *
2181 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2182 *      and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2183 *      using aggregation for such frames.)
2184 *
2185 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2186 *      for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2187 *      is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2188 *      CSA frame.
2189 *
2190 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2191 *      or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2192 *
2193 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2194 *      in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2195 *
2196 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2197 *      than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2198 *
2199 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2200 *      within A-MPDU.
2201 *
2202 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2203 *      for sent beacons.
2204 *
2205 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2206 *      station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2207 *      by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2208 *      from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2209 *
2210 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2211 *      reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2212 *      order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2213 *      timeout.
2214 *
2215 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2216 *      which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2217 *
2218 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2219 *      A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2220 *      When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2221 *      limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2222 *      max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2223 *
2224 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2225 *      skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2226 *
2227 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2228 *      by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2229 *      drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2230 *      is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2231 *
2232 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2233 *      The stack will not do fragmentation.
2234 *      The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2235 *
2236 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2237 *      TDLS links.
2238 *
2239 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2240 *      mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2241 *      deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2242 *      beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2243 *      virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2244 *      the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2245 *      deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2246 *
2247 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2248 *      support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2249 *
2250 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2251 *      course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2252 *
2253 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2254 *      extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2255 *      the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2256 *      but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2257 *      See also the documentation for that flag.
2258 *
2259 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2260 *      MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2261 *      TXQs to start with.
2262 *
2263 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2264 *      length in tx status information
2265 *
2266 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2267 *
2268 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2269 *      only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2270 *
2271 * @IEEE80211_HW_EXT_KEY_ID_NATIVE: Driver and hardware are supporting Extended
2272 *      Key ID and can handle two unicast keys per station for Rx and Tx.
2273 *
2274 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card/driver can't handle
2275 *      active Tx A-MPDU sessions with Extended Key IDs during rekey.
2276 *
2277 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2278 */
2279enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2280        IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2281        IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2282        IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2283        IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2284        IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2285        IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2286        IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2287        IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2288        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2289        IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2290        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2291        IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2292        IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2293        IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2294        IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2295        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2296        IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2297        IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2298        IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2299        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2300        IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2301        IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2302        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2303        IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2304        IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2305        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2306        IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2307        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2308        IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2309        IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2310        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2311        IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2312        IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2313        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2314        IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2315        IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2316        IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2317        IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2318        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2319        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2320        IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2321        IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2322        IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2323        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2324        IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2325        IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2326        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2327        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2328        IEEE80211_HW_EXT_KEY_ID_NATIVE,
2329        IEEE80211_HW_NO_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2330
2331        /* keep last, obviously */
2332        NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2333};
2334
2335/**
2336 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2337 *
2338 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2339 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2340 *
2341 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2342 *      802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2343 *      members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2344 *      and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2345 *      bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2346 *
2347 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2348 *
2349 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2350 *      along with this structure.
2351 *
2352 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2353 *
2354 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2355 *      for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2356 *
2357 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2358 *      Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2359 *
2360 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2361 *      only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2362 *
2363 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2364 *      that HW supports
2365 *
2366 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2367 *      data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2368 *      queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2369 *
2370 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2371 *      If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2372 *      set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2373 *
2374 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2375 *      within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2376 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2377 *      within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2378 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2379 *      within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2380 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2381 *      within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2382 *
2383 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2384 *      can handle.
2385 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2386 *      the hw can report back.
2387 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2388 *
2389 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2390 *      sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2391 *      aggregation.
2392 *      This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2393 *      number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2394 *      it shouldn't be set.
2395 *
2396 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2397 *      aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2398 *      advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2399 *      the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2400 *      with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2401 *      For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2402 *
2403 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2404 *      of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2405 *
2406 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2407 *      (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2408 *
2409 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2410 *      reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2411 *      include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2412 *      adding _BW is supported today.
2413 *
2414 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2415 *      the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2416 *      Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2417 *
2418 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2419 *
2420 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2421 *      @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2422 *      field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2423 *      device_timestamp.
2424 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2425 *      IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2426 *      IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2427 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2428 *      radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2429 *
2430 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2431 *      from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2432 *      other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2433 *
2434 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2435 *      for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2436 *      enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2437 *      Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2438 *      that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2439 *      neither enabled.
2440 *
2441 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2442 *      deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2443 *      Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2444 *
2445 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2446 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2447 *      supported by HW.
2448 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2449 *      device.
2450 *
2451 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2452 *      them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2453 *      unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2454 *
2455 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2456 *      refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2457 */
2458struct ieee80211_hw {
2459        struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2460        struct wiphy *wiphy;
2461        const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2462        void *priv;
2463        unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2464        unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2465        unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2466        int vif_data_size;
2467        int sta_data_size;
2468        int chanctx_data_size;
2469        int txq_data_size;
2470        u16 queues;
2471        u16 max_listen_interval;
2472        s8 max_signal;
2473        u8 max_rates;
2474        u8 max_report_rates;
2475        u8 max_rate_tries;
2476        u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2477        u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2478        u8 max_tx_fragments;
2479        u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2480        u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2481        u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2482        struct {
2483                int units_pos;
2484                s16 accuracy;
2485        } radiotap_timestamp;
2486        netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2487        u8 uapsd_queues;
2488        u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2489        u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2490        const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2491        u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2492        u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2493        u8 weight_multiplier;
2494};
2495
2496static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2497                                       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2498{
2499        return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2500}
2501#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)     _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2502
2503static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2504                                     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2505{
2506        return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2507}
2508#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)       _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2509
2510/**
2511 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2512 *
2513 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2514 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2515 */
2516struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2517        struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2518
2519        /* Keep last */
2520        struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2521};
2522
2523/**
2524 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2525 *
2526 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2527 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2528 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2529 * @status: channel-switch response status
2530 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2531 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2532 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2533 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2534 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2535 */
2536struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2537        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2538        struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2539        u8 action_code;
2540        u32 status;
2541        u32 timestamp;
2542        u16 switch_time;
2543        u16 switch_timeout;
2544        struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2545        u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2546};
2547
2548/**
2549 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2550 *
2551 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2552 *
2553 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2554 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2555 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2556 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2557 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2558 *
2559 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2560 */
2561struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2562
2563/**
2564 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2565 *
2566 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2567 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2568 */
2569static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2570{
2571        set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2572}
2573
2574/**
2575 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2576 *
2577 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2578 * @addr: the address to set
2579 */
2580static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2581{
2582        memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2583}
2584
2585static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2586ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2587                      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2588{
2589        if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2590                return NULL;
2591        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2592}
2593
2594static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2595ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2596                           const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2597{
2598        if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2599                return NULL;
2600        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2601}
2602
2603static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2604ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2605                             const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2606{
2607        if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2608                return NULL;
2609        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2610}
2611
2612/**
2613 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2614 * @hw: the hardware
2615 * @skb: the skb
2616 *
2617 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2618 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2619 */
2620void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2621
2622/**
2623 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2624 *
2625 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2626 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2627 *
2628 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2629 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2630 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2631 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2632 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2633 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2634 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2635 *
2636 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2637 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2638 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2639 *
2640 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2641 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2642 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2643 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2644 *
2645 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2646 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2647 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2648 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2649 *
2650 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2651 *
2652 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2653 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2654 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2655 * based on the receive flags.
2656 *
2657 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2658 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2659 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2660 * keys.
2661 *
2662 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2663 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2664 * handler.
2665 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2666 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2667 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2668 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2669 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2670 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2671 *
2672 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2673 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2674 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2675 *
2676 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2677 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2678 * requirements:
2679 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2680      mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2681      completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2682   2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2683      at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2684   3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2685      encrypted with the new key and
2686   4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2687   Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2688 */
2689
2690/**
2691 * DOC: Powersave support
2692 *
2693 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2694 *
2695 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2696 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2697 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2698 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2699 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2700 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2701 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2702 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2703 *
2704 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2705 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2706 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2707 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2708 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2709 *
2710 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2711 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2712 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2713 *
2714 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2715 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2716 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2717 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2718 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2719 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2720 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2721 *
2722 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2723 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2724 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2725 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2726 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2727 * periods.
2728 *
2729 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2730 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2731 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2732 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2733 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2734 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2735 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2736 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2737 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2738 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2739 *
2740 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2741 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2742 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2743 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2744 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2745 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2746 *
2747 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2748 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2749 */
2750
2751/**
2752 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2753 *
2754 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2755 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2756 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2757 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2758 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2759 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2760 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2761 *
2762 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2763 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2764 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2765 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2766 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2767 *
2768 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2769 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2770 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2771 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2772 *
2773 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2774 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2775 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2776 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2777 *
2778 *  - a list of information element IDs
2779 *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2780 *
2781 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2782 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2783 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2784 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2785 * vendor information elements.
2786 *
2787 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2788 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2789 *
2790 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2791 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2792 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2793 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2794 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2795 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2796 *
2797 *
2798 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2799 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2800 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2801 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2802 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2803 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2804 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2805 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2806 *
2807 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2808 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2809 * signal strength threshold checking.
2810 */
2811
2812/**
2813 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2814 *
2815 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2816 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2817 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2818 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2819 *
2820 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2821 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2822 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2823 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2824 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2825 * hardware flags.
2826 *
2827 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2828 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2829 * turned off otherwise.
2830 *
2831 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2832 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2833 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2834 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2835 */
2836
2837/**
2838 * DOC: Frame filtering
2839 *
2840 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2841 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2842 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2843 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2844 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2845 *
2846 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2847 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2848 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2849 *
2850 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2851 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2852 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2853 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2854 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2855 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2856 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2857 *
2858 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2859 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2860 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2861 * or dropped.
2862 *
2863 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2864 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2865 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2866 * the flag, but not clear it.
2867 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2868 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2869 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2870 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2871 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2872 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2873 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2874 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2875 */
2876
2877/**
2878 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2879 *
2880 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2881 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2882 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2883 *
2884 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2885 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2886 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2887 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2888 * the driver code.
2889 *
2890 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2891 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2892 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2893 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2894 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2895 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2896 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2897 *
2898 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2899 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2900 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2901 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2902 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2903 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2904 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2905 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2906 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2907 * @sta_notify callback.
2908 *
2909 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2910 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2911 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2912 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2913 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2914 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2915 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2916 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2917 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2918 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2919 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2920 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2921 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2922 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2923 *
2924 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2925 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2926 *
2927 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2928 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2929 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2930 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2931 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2932 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2933 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2934 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2935 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2936 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2937 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2938 *
2939 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2940 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2941 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2942 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2943 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2944 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2945 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2946 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2947 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2948 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2949 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2950 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2951 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2952 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2953 *
2954 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2955 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2956 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2957 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2958 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2959 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2960 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2961 *
2962 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2963 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2964 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2965 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2966 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2967 *
2968 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2969 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2970 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2971 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
2972 */
2973
2974/**
2975 * DOC: HW queue control
2976 *
2977 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2978 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2979 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2980 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2981 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2982 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2983 *
2984 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2985 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2986 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2987 *
2988 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2989 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2990 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2991 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2992 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2993 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2994 * the hardware queue.
2995 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2996 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2997 *
2998 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2999 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3000 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3001 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3002 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3003 *
3004 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3005 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3006 * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3007 * off-channel queue:         9
3008 *
3009 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3010 *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3011 *
3012 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3013 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3014 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3015 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3016 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3017 *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3018 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3019 *
3020 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3021 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3022 *
3023 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3024 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3025 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3026 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3027 */
3028
3029/**
3030 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3031 *
3032 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3033 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3034 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3035 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3036 *
3037 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3038 *      by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3039 *      multicast address.
3040 *
3041 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3042 *      %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3043 *
3044 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3045 *      the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3046 *
3047 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3048 *      to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3049 *      by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3050 *      mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3051 *      honour this flag if possible.
3052 *
3053 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3054 *      station
3055 *
3056 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3057 *
3058 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3059 *
3060 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3061 */
3062enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3063        FIF_ALLMULTI            = 1<<1,
3064        FIF_FCSFAIL             = 1<<2,
3065        FIF_PLCPFAIL            = 1<<3,
3066        FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3067        FIF_CONTROL             = 1<<5,
3068        FIF_OTHER_BSS           = 1<<6,
3069        FIF_PSPOLL              = 1<<7,
3070        FIF_PROBE_REQ           = 1<<8,
3071};
3072
3073/**
3074 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3075 *
3076 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3077 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3078 *
3079 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3080 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3081 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3082 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3083 *
3084 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3085 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3086 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
3087 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3088 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3089 *      queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3090 *      driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3091 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3092 *      called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3093 *      ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3094 *      session is gone and removes the station.
3095 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3096 *      but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3097 *      now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3098 *      should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3099 */
3100enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3101        IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3102        IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3103        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3104        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3105        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3106        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3107        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3108};
3109
3110/**
3111 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3112 *
3113 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3114 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3115 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3116 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3117 *      action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3118 *      actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3119 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3120 *      action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3121 *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3122 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3123 *      valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3124 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3125 *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3126 */
3127struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3128        enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3129        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3130        u16 tid;
3131        u16 ssn;
3132        u16 buf_size;
3133        bool amsdu;
3134        u16 timeout;
3135};
3136
3137/**
3138 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3139 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3140 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3141 *      frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3142 */
3143enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3144        IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3145        IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3146};
3147
3148/**
3149 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3150 *
3151 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3152 *      to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3153 *      information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3154 *      flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3155 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3156 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3157 *      changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3158 *      the peer.
3159 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3160 *      by the peer
3161 */
3162enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3163        IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED         = BIT(0),
3164        IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED       = BIT(1),
3165        IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3166        IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED        = BIT(3),
3167};
3168
3169/**
3170 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3171 *
3172 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3173 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3174 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3175 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3176 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3177 *
3178 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3179 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3180 *      for sending managment frames offchannel.
3181 */
3182enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3183        IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3184        IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3185};
3186
3187/**
3188 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3189 *
3190 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3191 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3192 *
3193 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3194 *      (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3195 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3196 *      of wowlan configuration)
3197 */
3198enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3199        IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3200        IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3201};
3202
3203/**
3204 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3205 *
3206 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3207 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3208 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3209 *
3210 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3211 *      skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3212 *      The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3213 *      configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3214 *      preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3215 *      Must be atomic.
3216 *
3217 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3218 *      is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3219 *      frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3220 *      Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3221 *      or zero.
3222 *      When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3223 *      to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3224 *      is added.
3225 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3226 *
3227 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3228 *      is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3229 *      it must turn off frame reception.)
3230 *      May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3231 *      an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3232 *      you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3233 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3234 *
3235 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3236 *      stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3237 *      ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3238 *      configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3239 *      reconfigured at resume time.
3240 *      The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3241 *      wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3242 *      supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3243 *      must return 1 from this function.
3244 *
3245 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3246 *      now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3247 *      functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3248 *      to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3249 *      will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3250 *
3251 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3252 *      modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3253 *      supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3254 *      in suspend().
3255 *
3256 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3257 *      enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3258 *      and @stop must be implemented.
3259 *      The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3260 *      the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3261 *      interface is given in the conf parameter.
3262 *      The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3263 *      negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3264 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3265 *
3266 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3267 *      is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3268 *      switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3269 *      Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3270 *      found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3271 *
3272 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3273 *      The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3274 *      and no monitor interfaces are present.
3275 *      When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3276 *      must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3277 *      the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3278 *      MAC address of the device going away.
3279 *      Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3280 *
3281 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3282 *      function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3283 *      This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3284 *      if it does. The callback can sleep.
3285 *
3286 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3287 *      parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3288 *      level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3289 *      This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3290 *      for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3291 *      of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3292 *      can sleep.
3293 *
3294 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3295 *      This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3296 *      to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3297 *
3298 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3299 *      See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3300 *      This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3301 *
3302 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3303 *      This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3304 *      should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3305 *      of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3306 *      which flags are changed.
3307 *      This callback can sleep.
3308 *
3309 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3310 *      must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3311 *
3312 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3313 *      This callback is only called between add_interface and
3314 *      remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3315 *      is enabled.
3316 *      Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3317 *      The callback can sleep.
3318 *
3319 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3320 *      This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3321 *      which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3322 *      The callback must be atomic.
3323 *
3324 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3325 *      host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3326 *      necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3327 *      After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3328 *      userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3329 *
3330 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3331 *      WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3332 *      offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3333 *
3334 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3335 *      the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3336 *      configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3337 *      registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3338 *      that power save is disabled.
3339 *      The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3340 *      entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3341 *      at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3342 *      (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3343 *      When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3344 *      note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3345 *      any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3346 *      This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3347 *      this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3348 *      software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3349 *      capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3350 *      advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3351 *      The callback can sleep.
3352 *
3353 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3354 *      The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3355 *      but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3356 *      ieee80211_scan_completed().
3357 *      This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3358 *      scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3359 *      The callback can sleep.
3360 *
3361 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3362 *      specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3363 *      ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3364 *      This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3365 *
3366 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3367 *      In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3368 *
3369 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3370 *      is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3371 *      The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3372 *      the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3373 *      can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3374 *
3375 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3376 *      software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3377 *      this notification.
3378 *      The callback can sleep.
3379 *
3380 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3381 *      Returns zero if statistics are available.
3382 *      The callback can sleep.
3383 *
3384 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3385 *      IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3386 *      IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3387 *      The callback must be atomic.
3388 *
3389 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3390 *      if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3391 *      stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3392 *      should be set as well.
3393 *      The callback can sleep.
3394 *
3395 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3396 *      The callback can sleep.
3397 *
3398 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3399 *      AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3400 *
3401 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3402 *      station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3403 *      returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3404 *      no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3405 *      the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3406 *      This callback can sleep.
3407 *
3408 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3409 *      when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3410 *      should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3411 *      callback can sleep.
3412 *
3413 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3414 *      associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3415 *      in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3416 *      %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3417 *
3418 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3419 *      station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3420 *      This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3421 *      It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3422 *      up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3423 *      isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3424 *      period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3425 *      See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3426 *      The callback can sleep.
3427 *
3428 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3429 *      synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3430 *      pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3431 *      the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3432 *      in @sta_state.
3433 *      The callback can sleep.
3434 *
3435 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3436 *      used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3437 *      from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3438 *      in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3439 *      uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3440 *      otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3441 *      Must be atomic.
3442 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3443 *      is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3444 *      the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3445 *
3446 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3447 *      filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3448 *      let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3449 *      the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3450 *      all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3451 *      Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3452 *      The callback can sleep.
3453 *
3454 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3455 *      bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3456 *      Returns a negative error code on failure.
3457 *      The callback can sleep.
3458 *
3459 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3460 *      this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3461 *      required function.
3462 *      The callback can sleep.
3463 *
3464 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3465 *      Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3466 *      required function.
3467 *      The callback can sleep.
3468 *
3469 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3470 *      firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3471 *      calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3472 *      as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3473 *      The callback can sleep.
3474 *
3475 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3476 *      with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3477 *      function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3478 *      TSF synchronization.
3479 *      The callback can sleep.
3480 *
3481 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3482 *      This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3483 *      used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3484 *      Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3485 *      The callback can sleep.
3486 *
3487 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3488 *
3489 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3490 *      need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3491 *      and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3492 *      The callback can sleep.
3493 *
3494 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3495 *      in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3496 *      accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3497 *      estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3498 *      coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3499 *
3500 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3501 *      be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3502 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3503 *
3504 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3505 *      that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3506 *      of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3507 *      use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3508 *      If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3509 *      Note that vif can be NULL.
3510 *      The callback can sleep.
3511 *
3512 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3513 *      switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3514 *      callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3515 *      completion of the channel switch.
3516 *
3517 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3518 *      Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3519 *      reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3520 *      (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3521 *
3522 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3523 *
3524 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3525 *      call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3526 *      that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3527 *      offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3528 *      normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3529 *      duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3530 *      ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3531 *      Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3532 *      must be accepted in this case.
3533 *      This callback may sleep.
3534 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3535 *      aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3536 *
3537 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3538 *
3539 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3540 *
3541 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3542 *      queues before entering power save.
3543 *
3544 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3545 *      when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3546 *      The callback can sleep.
3547 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3548 *      &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3549 *      The callback must be atomic.
3550 *
3551 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3552 *      parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3553 *      sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3554 *      to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3555 *      Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3556 *      if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3557 *      the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3558 *      the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3559 *      more-data bit must always be set.
3560 *      The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3561 *      from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3562 *      In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3563 *      @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3564 *      this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3565 *      on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3566 *      period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3567 *      responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3568 *      In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3569 *      bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3570 *      at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3571 *      setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3572 *      service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3573 *      on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3574 *      ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3575 *      This callback must be atomic.
3576 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3577 *      to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3578 *      via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3579 *      released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3580 *      and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3581 *      frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3582 *      them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3583 *      on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3584 *      bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3585 *      ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3586 *      The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3587 *      frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3588 *      This callback must be atomic.
3589 *
3590 * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3591 *
3592 * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3593 *
3594 * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3595 *      and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3596 *
3597 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3598 *      before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3599 *      bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3600 *      yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3601 *      transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3602 *      powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3603 *      management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3604 *      driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3605 *      and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3606 *      For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3607 *      would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3608 *      frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3609 *      The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3610 *      mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3611 *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3612 *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3613 *      The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3614 *
3615 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3616 *      a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3617 *      channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3618 *      setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3619 *      mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3620 *      discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3621 *      2 * (DTIM period).
3622 *      The callback is optional and can sleep.
3623 *
3624 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3625 *      This callback may sleep.
3626 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3627 *      This callback may sleep.
3628 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3629 *      may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3630 *      channel context with different settings
3631 *      This callback may sleep.
3632 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3633 *      to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3634 *      This callback may sleep.
3635 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3636 *      unbound from vif.
3637 *      This callback may sleep.
3638 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3639 *      another, as specified in the list of
3640 *      @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3641 *      to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3642 *      This callback may sleep.
3643 *
3644 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3645 *      information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3646 *      context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3647 *      software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3648 *      just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3649 *      disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3650 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3651 *
3652 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3653 *      during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3654 *      This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3655 *      indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3656 *      This callback may sleep.
3657 *
3658 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3659 *      Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3660 *      This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3661 *
3662 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3663 *      Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3664 *      function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3665 *      decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3666 *      ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3667 *      get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3668 *      1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3669 *      transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3670 *      If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3671 *      since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3672 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3673 *      before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3674 *      gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3675 *      the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3676 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3677 *      after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3678 *      driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3679 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3680 *      when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3681 *      driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3682 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3683 *      when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3684 *      CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3685 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3686 *      information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3687 *      channel context is bound before this is called.
3688 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3689 *
3690 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3691 *      specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3692 *      if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3693 *
3694 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3695 *      and hardware limits.
3696 *
3697 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3698 *      is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3699 *      and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3700 *      driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3701 *      the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3702 *      The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3703 *      optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3704 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3705 *      peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3706 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3707 *      response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3708 *      parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3709 *      an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3710 *      response template is provided, together with the location of the
3711 *      switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3712 *      the function call.
3713 *
3714 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3715 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3716 *      synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3717 *      pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3718 *      currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3719 *
3720 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3721 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3722 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3723 *      contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3724 *      are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3725 *      The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3726 *      some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3727 *      changed parameters.
3728 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3729 *      cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3730 *      this call.
3731 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3732 *      ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3733 *      NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3734 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3735 *      aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3736 *      between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3737 *      skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3738 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3739 *      Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3740 *
3741 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3742 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3743 */
3744struct ieee80211_ops {
3745        void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3746                   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3747                   struct sk_buff *skb);
3748        int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3749        void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3750#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3751        int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3752        int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3753        void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3754#endif
3755        int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3756                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3757        int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3758                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3759                                enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3760        void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3761                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3762        int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3763        void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3764                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3765                                 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3766                                 u32 changed);
3767
3768        int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3769        void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3770
3771        u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3772                                 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3773        void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3774                                 unsigned int changed_flags,
3775                                 unsigned int *total_flags,
3776                                 u64 multicast);
3777        void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3778                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3779                                    unsigned int filter_flags,
3780                                    unsigned int changed_flags);
3781        int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3782                       bool set);
3783        int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3784                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3785                       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3786        void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3787                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3788                                struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3789                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3790                                u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3791        void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3792                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3793                               struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3794        void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3795                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3796        int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3797                       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3798        void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3799                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3800        int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3801                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3802                                struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3803                                struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3804        int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3805                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3806        void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3807                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3808                              const u8 *mac_addr);
3809        void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3810                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3811        int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3812                         struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3813        void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3814                            struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3815                            struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3816        int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3817        int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3818        int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3819                       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3820        int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3821                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3822#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3823        void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3824                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3825                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3826                                struct dentry *dir);
3827#endif
3828        void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3829                        enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3830        int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3831                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3832                             struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3833        int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3834                         struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3835                         enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3836                         enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3837        void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3838                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3839                                   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3840        void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3841                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3842                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3843                              u32 changed);
3844        void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3845                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3846                                    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3847        void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3848                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3849                               struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3850                               struct station_info *sinfo);
3851        int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3852                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3853                       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3854        u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3855        void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3856                        u64 tsf);
3857        void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3858                           s64 offset);
3859        void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3860        int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3861
3862        /**
3863         * @ampdu_action:
3864         * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3865         * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3866         * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3867         * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3868         * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3869         * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3870         * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3871         * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3872         * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3873         *
3874         * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3875         * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3876         * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3877         *
3878         * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3879         * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3880         *
3881         * - ``TX:        1   or``
3882         * - ``TX:        18  or``
3883         * - ``TX:        81``
3884         *
3885         * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3886         *
3887         * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3888         * The callback can sleep.
3889         */
3890        int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3891                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3892                            struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3893        int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3894                struct survey_info *survey);
3895        void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3896        void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3897#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3898        int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3899                            void *data, int len);
3900        int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3901                             struct netlink_callback *cb,
3902                             void *data, int len);
3903#endif
3904        void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3905                      u32 queues, bool drop);
3906        void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3907                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3908                               struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3909        int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3910        int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3911
3912        int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3913                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3914                                 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3915                                 int duration,
3916                                 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3917        int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3918        int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3919        void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3920                              u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3921        bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3922        int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3923                                const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3924        void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3925                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3926                               const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3927
3928        void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3929                                      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3930                                      u16 tids, int num_frames,
3931                                      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3932                                      bool more_data);
3933        void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3934                                        struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3935                                        u16 tids, int num_frames,
3936                                        enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3937                                        bool more_data);
3938
3939        int     (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3940                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3941        void    (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3942                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3943                                struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3944        void    (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3945                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3946                                  u32 sset, u8 *data);
3947
3948        void    (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3949                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3950                                  u16 duration);
3951
3952        void    (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3953                                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3954
3955        int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3956                           struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3957        void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3958                               struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3959        void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3960                               struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3961                               u32 changed);
3962        int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3963                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3964                                  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3965        void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3967                                     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3968        int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3969                                  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3970                                  int n_vifs,
3971                                  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
3972
3973        void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3974                                  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
3975
3976#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3977        void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3978                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3979                                 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3980#endif
3981        void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983                                      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
3984        int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3985                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3986                                  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3987
3988        int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3989                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3990        void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3991                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3992        void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3993                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3994                                         struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3995
3996        int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3997        void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3998        u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3999                                       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4000        int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4001                           int *dbm);
4002
4003        int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4005                                   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4006                                   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4007                                   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4008        void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4009                                           struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4010                                           struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4011        void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4012                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4013                                         struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4014
4015        void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4016                              struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4017        void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4018
4019        int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4020                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4021                         struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4022        int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4023                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4024        int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4025                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4026                               struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4027        int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4028                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4029                            const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4030        void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4031                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4032                            u8 instance_id);
4033        bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4034                                       struct sk_buff *head,
4035                                       struct sk_buff *skb);
4036        int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4037                                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4038                                       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4039        int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4040                          struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4041        void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042                           struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4043};
4044
4045/**
4046 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4047 *
4048 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4049 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4050 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4051 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4052 * @priv_data_len.
4053 *
4054 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4055 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4056 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4057 *      NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4058 *
4059 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4060 */
4061struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4062                                           const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4063                                           const char *requested_name);
4064
4065/**
4066 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4067 *
4068 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4069 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4070 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4071 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4072 * @priv_data_len.
4073 *
4074 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4075 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4076 *
4077 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4078 */
4079static inline
4080struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4081                                        const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4082{
4083        return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4084}
4085
4086/**
4087 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4088 *
4089 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4090 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4091 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4092 *
4093 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4094 *
4095 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4096 */
4097int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4098
4099/**
4100 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4101 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4102 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4103 *      (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4104 */
4105struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4106        int throughput;
4107        int blink_time;
4108};
4109
4110/**
4111 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4112 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4113 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4114 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4115 *      interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4116 */
4117enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4118        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO          = BIT(0),
4119        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK           = BIT(1),
4120        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED      = BIT(2),
4121};
4122
4123#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4124const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4125const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4126const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4127const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4128const char *
4129__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4130                                   unsigned int flags,
4131                                   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4132                                   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4133#endif
4134/**
4135 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4136 *
4137 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4138 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4139 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4140 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4141 *
4142 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4143 *
4144 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4145 */
4146static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4147{
4148#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4149        return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4150#else
4151        return NULL;
4152#endif
4153}
4154
4155/**
4156 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4157 *
4158 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4159 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4160 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4161 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4162 *
4163 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4164 *
4165 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4166 */
4167static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4168{
4169#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4170        return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4171#else
4172        return NULL;
4173#endif
4174}
4175
4176/**
4177 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4178 *
4179 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4180 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4181 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4182 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4183 *
4184 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4185 *
4186 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4187 */
4188static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4189{
4190#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4191        return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4192#else
4193        return NULL;
4194#endif
4195}
4196
4197/**
4198 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4199 *
4200 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4201 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4202 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4203 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4204 *
4205 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4206 *
4207 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4208 */
4209static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4210{
4211#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4212        return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4213#else
4214        return NULL;
4215#endif
4216}
4217
4218/**
4219 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4220 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4221 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4222 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4223 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4224 *
4225 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4226 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4227 *
4228 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4229 */
4230static inline const char *
4231ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4232                                 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4233                                 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4234{
4235#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4236        return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4237                                                  blink_table_len);
4238#else
4239        return NULL;
4240#endif
4241}
4242
4243/**
4244 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4245 *
4246 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4247 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4248 *
4249 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4250 */
4251void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4252
4253/**
4254 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4255 *
4256 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4257 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4258 * before calling this function.
4259 *
4260 * @hw: the hardware to free
4261 */
4262void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4263
4264/**
4265 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4266 *
4267 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4268 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4269 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4270 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4271 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4272 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4273 *
4274 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4275 */
4276void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4277
4278/**
4279 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4280 *
4281 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4282 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4283 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4284 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4285 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4286 *
4287 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4288 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4289 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4290 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4291 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4292 *
4293 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4294 *
4295 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4296 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4297 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4298 * @napi: the NAPI context
4299 */
4300void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4301                       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4302
4303/**
4304 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4305 *
4306 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4307 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4308 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4309 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4310 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4311 *
4312 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4313 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4314 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4315 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4316 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4317 *
4318 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4319 *
4320 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4321 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4322 */
4323static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4324{
4325        ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4326}
4327
4328/**
4329 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4330 *
4331 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4332 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4333 *
4334 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4335 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4336 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4337 *
4338 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4339 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4340 */
4341void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4342
4343/**
4344 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4345 *
4346 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4347 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4348 *
4349 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4350 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4351 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4352 *
4353 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4354 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4355 */
4356static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4357                                   struct sk_buff *skb)
4358{
4359        local_bh_disable();
4360        ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4361        local_bh_enable();
4362}
4363
4364/**
4365 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4366 *
4367 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4368 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4369 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4370 *
4371 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4372 *
4373 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4374 * each other.
4375 *
4376 * @sta: currently connected sta
4377 * @start: start or stop PS
4378 *
4379 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4380 */
4381int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4382
4383/**
4384 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4385 *                                  (in process context)
4386 *
4387 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4388 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4389 * applies.
4390 *
4391 * @sta: currently connected sta
4392 * @start: start or stop PS
4393 *
4394 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4395 */
4396static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4397                                                  bool start)
4398{
4399        int ret;
4400
4401        local_bh_disable();
4402        ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4403        local_bh_enable();
4404
4405        return ret;
4406}
4407
4408/**
4409 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4410 * @sta: currently connected station
4411 *
4412 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4413 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4414 * connected station was received.
4415 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4416 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4417 * be serialized.
4418 */
4419void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4420
4421/**
4422 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4423 * @sta: currently connected station
4424 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4425 *
4426 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4427 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4428 * from a connected station was received.
4429 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4430 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4431 * serialized.
4432 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4433 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4434 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4435 * checks.
4436 */
4437void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4438
4439/*
4440 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4441 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4442 */
4443#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM    ALIGN(14, 4)
4444
4445/**
4446 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4447 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4448 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4449 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4450 *
4451 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4452 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4453 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4454 *
4455 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4456 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4457 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4458 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4459 *
4460 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4461 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4462 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4463 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4464 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4465 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4466 *
4467 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4468 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4469 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4470 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4471 * use this API.
4472 */
4473void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4474                                u8 tid, bool buffered);
4475
4476/**
4477 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4478 *
4479 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4480 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4481 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4482 *
4483 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4484 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4485 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4486 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4487 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4488 */
4489void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4490                            struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4491                            struct sk_buff *skb,
4492                            struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4493                            int max_rates);
4494
4495/**
4496 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4497 *
4498 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4499 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4500 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4501 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4502 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4503 * slow stations to starve).
4504 *
4505 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4506 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4507 */
4508void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4509                                           u32 thr);
4510
4511/**
4512 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4513 *
4514 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4515 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4516 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4517 *
4518 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4519 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4520 * @info: tx status information
4521 */
4522void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4523                              struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4524                              struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4525
4526/**
4527 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4528 *
4529 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4530 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4531 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4532 *
4533 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4534 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4535 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4536 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4537 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4538 *
4539 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4540 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4541 */
4542void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4543                         struct sk_buff *skb);
4544
4545/**
4546 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4547 *
4548 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4549 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4550 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4551 *
4552 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4553 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4554 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4555 *
4556 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4557 * @status: tx status information
4558 */
4559void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4560                             struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4561
4562/**
4563 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4564 *
4565 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4566 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4567 * specific skbs.
4568 *
4569 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4570 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4571 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4572 *
4573 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4574 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4575 *      (NULL for multicast packets)
4576 * @info: tx status information
4577 */
4578static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4579                                             struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4580                                             struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4581{
4582        struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4583                .sta = sta,
4584                .info = info,
4585        };
4586
4587        ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4588}
4589
4590/**
4591 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4592 *
4593 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4594 *
4595 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4596 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4597 * for a single hardware.
4598 *
4599 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4600 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4601 */
4602static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4603                                          struct sk_buff *skb)
4604{
4605        local_bh_disable();
4606        ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4607        local_bh_enable();
4608}
4609
4610/**
4611 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4612 *
4613 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4614 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4615 *
4616 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4617 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4618 *
4619 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4620 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4621 */
4622void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4623                                 struct sk_buff *skb);
4624
4625/**
4626 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4627 *
4628 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4629 * connected STA.
4630 *
4631 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4632 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4633 */
4634void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4635
4636#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4637
4638/**
4639 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4640 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4641 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4642 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4643 *      to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4644 *      should be ignored.
4645 */
4646struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4647        u16 tim_offset;
4648        u16 tim_length;
4649
4650        u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4651};
4652
4653/**
4654 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4655 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4656 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4657 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4658 *      receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4659 *
4660 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4661 * obtain the beacon template.
4662 *
4663 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4664 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4665 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4666 * applicable, the CSA count.
4667 *
4668 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4669 *
4670 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4671 */
4672struct sk_buff *
4673ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4674                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4675                              struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4676
4677/**
4678 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4679 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4680 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4681 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4682 *      Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4683 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4684 *      (including the ID and length bytes!).
4685 *      Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4686 *
4687 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4688 * obtain the beacon frame.
4689 *
4690 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4691 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4692 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4693 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4694 *
4695 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4696 *
4697 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4698 */
4699struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4700                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4701                                         u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4702
4703/**
4704 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4705 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4706 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4707 *
4708 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4709 *
4710 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4711 */
4712static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4713                                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4714{
4715        return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4716}
4717
4718/**
4719 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4720 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4721 *
4722 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4723 * This function is called implicitly when
4724 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4725 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4726 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4727 *
4728 * Return: new csa counter value
4729 */
4730u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4731
4732/**
4733 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4734 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4735 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4736 *
4737 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4738 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4739 *
4740 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4741 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4742 */
4743void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4744
4745/**
4746 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4747 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4748 *
4749 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4750 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4751 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4752 */
4753void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4754
4755/**
4756 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4757 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4758 *
4759 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4760 */
4761bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4762
4763
4764/**
4765 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4766 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4767 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4768 *
4769 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4770 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4771 *
4772 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4773 *
4774 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4775 */
4776struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4777                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4778
4779/**
4780 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4781 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4782 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4783 *
4784 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4785 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4786 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4787 *
4788 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4789 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4790 *
4791 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4792 */
4793struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4794                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4795
4796/**
4797 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4798 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4799 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4800 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4801 *      if at all possible
4802 *
4803 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4804 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4805 * BSSID and address is used.
4806 *
4807 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4808 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4809 *
4810 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4811 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4812 *
4813 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4814 */
4815struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4816                                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4817                                       bool qos_ok);
4818
4819/**
4820 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4821 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4822 * @src_addr: source MAC address
4823 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4824 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4825 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4826 *
4827 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4828 * hardware.
4829 *
4830 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4831 */
4832struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4833                                       const u8 *src_addr,
4834                                       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4835                                       size_t tailroom);
4836
4837/**
4838 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4839 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4840 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4841 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4842 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4843 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4844 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4845 *
4846 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4847 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4848 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4849 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4850 */
4851void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4852                       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4853                       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4854                       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4855
4856/**
4857 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4858 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4859 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4860 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4861 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4862 *
4863 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4864 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4865 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4866 *
4867 * Return: The duration.
4868 */
4869__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4870                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4871                              const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4872
4873/**
4874 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4875 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4876 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4877 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4878 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4879 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4880 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4881 *
4882 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4883 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4884 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4885 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4886 */
4887void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4888                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4889                             const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4890                             const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4891                             struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4892
4893/**
4894 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4895 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4896 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4897 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4898 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4899 *
4900 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4901 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4902 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4903 *
4904 * Return: The duration.
4905 */
4906__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4907                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4908                                    size_t frame_len,
4909                                    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4910
4911/**
4912 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4913 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4914 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4915 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4916 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4917 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4918 *
4919 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4920 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4921 *
4922 * Return: The duration.
4923 */
4924__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4925                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4926                                        enum nl80211_band band,
4927                                        size_t frame_len,
4928                                        struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4929
4930/**
4931 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4932 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4933 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4934 *
4935 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4936 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4937 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4938 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4939 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4940 *
4941 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4942 * frames are available.
4943 *
4944 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4945 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4946 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4947 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4948 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4949 * use common code for all beacons.
4950 */
4951struct sk_buff *
4952ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4953
4954/**
4955 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4956 *
4957 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4958 *
4959 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4960 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4961 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4962 */
4963void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4964                               u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4965
4966/**
4967 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
4968 *
4969 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4970 * from the given packet.
4971 *
4972 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4973 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4974 *      with this P1K
4975 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4976 */
4977static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4978                                          struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4979{
4980        struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4981        const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4982        u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4983
4984        ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4985}
4986
4987/**
4988 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4989 *
4990 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4991 * and transmitter address.
4992 *
4993 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4994 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4995 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4996 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4997 */
4998void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4999                               const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5000
5001/**
5002 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5003 *
5004 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5005 * in the packet.
5006 *
5007 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5008 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5009 *      encrypted with this key
5010 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5011 */
5012void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5013                            struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5014
5015/**
5016 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5017 *
5018 * @pos: start of crypto header
5019 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5020 * @pn: PN to add
5021 *
5022 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5023 * the packet payload)
5024 *
5025 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5026 * point to the crypto header)
5027 */
5028u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5029
5030/**
5031 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5032 *
5033 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5034 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5035 *      the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5036 *      CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5037 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5038 *
5039 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5040 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5041 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5042 *
5043 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5044 * can be done concurrently.
5045 */
5046void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5047                              int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5048
5049/**
5050 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5051 *
5052 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5053 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5054 *      the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5055 *      CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5056 * @seq: new sequence data
5057 *
5058 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5059 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5060 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5061 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5062 *
5063 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5064 * can be done concurrently.
5065 */
5066void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5067                              int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5068
5069/**
5070 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5071 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5072 *
5073 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5074 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5075 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5076 *
5077 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5078 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5079 */
5080void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5081
5082/**
5083 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5084 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5085 * @keyconf: new key data
5086 *
5087 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5088 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5089 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5090 *
5091 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5092 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5093 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5094 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5095 *
5096 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5097 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5098 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5099 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5100 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5101 * of the reconfiguration.
5102 *
5103 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5104 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5105 *
5106 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5107 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5108 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5109 * the key that's being replaced.
5110 */
5111struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5112ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5113                        struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5114
5115/**
5116 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5117 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5118 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5119 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5120 * @gfp: allocation flags
5121 */
5122void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5123                                const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5124
5125/**
5126 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5127 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5128 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5129 *
5130 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5131 */
5132void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5133
5134/**
5135 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5136 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5137 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5138 *
5139 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5140 */
5141void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5142
5143/**
5144 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5145 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5146 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5147 *
5148 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5149 *
5150 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5151 */
5152
5153int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5154
5155/**
5156 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5157 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5158 *
5159 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5160 */
5161void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5162
5163/**
5164 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5165 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5166 *
5167 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5168 */
5169void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5170
5171/**
5172 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5173 *
5174 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5175 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5176 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5177 * any context, including hardirq context.
5178 *
5179 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5180 * @info: information about the completed scan
5181 */
5182void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5183                              struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5184
5185/**
5186 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5187 *
5188 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5189 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5190 *
5191 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5192 */
5193void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5194
5195/**
5196 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5197 *
5198 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5199 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5200 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5201 * while associating, for instance.
5202 *
5203 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5204 */
5205void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5206
5207/**
5208 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5209 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5210 *      been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5211 *      reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5212 *      interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5213 *      haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5214 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5215 *      interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5216 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5217 */
5218enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5219        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL     = 0,
5220        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5221        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE     = BIT(1),
5222};
5223
5224/**
5225 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5226 *
5227 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5228 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5229 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5230 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5231 *
5232 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5233 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5234 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5235 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5236 */
5237void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5238                                  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5239                                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5240                                  void *data);
5241
5242/**
5243 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5244 *
5245 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5246 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5247 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5248 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5249 * be used.
5250 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5251 *
5252 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5253 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5254 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5255 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5256 */
5257static inline void
5258ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5259                                    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5260                                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5261                                    void *data)
5262{
5263        ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5264                                     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5265                                     iterator, data);
5266}
5267
5268/**
5269 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5270 *
5271 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5272 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5273 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5274 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5275 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5276 *
5277 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5278 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5279 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5280 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5281 */
5282void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5283                                                u32 iter_flags,
5284                                                void (*iterator)(void *data,
5285                                                    u8 *mac,
5286                                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5287                                                void *data);
5288
5289/**
5290 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5291 *
5292 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5293 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5294 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5295 *
5296 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5297 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5298 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5299 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5300 */
5301void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5302                                              u32 iter_flags,
5303                                              void (*iterator)(void *data,
5304                                                u8 *mac,
5305                                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5306                                              void *data);
5307
5308/**
5309 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5310 *
5311 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5312 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5313 * function for them.
5314 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5315 *
5316 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5317 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5318 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5319 */
5320void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5321                                       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5322                                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5323                                       void *data);
5324/**
5325 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5326 *
5327 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5328 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5329 *
5330 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5331 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5332 */
5333void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5334
5335/**
5336 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5337 *
5338 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5339 * workqueue.
5340 *
5341 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5342 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5343 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5344 */
5345void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5346                                  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5347                                  unsigned long delay);
5348
5349/**
5350 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5351 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5352 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5353 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5354 *
5355 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5356 *
5357 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5358 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5359 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5360 */
5361int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5362                                  u16 timeout);
5363
5364/**
5365 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5366 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5367 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5368 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5369 *
5370 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5371 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5372 * from any context.
5373 */
5374void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5375                                      u16 tid);
5376
5377/**
5378 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5379 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5380 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5381 *
5382 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5383 *
5384 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5385 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5386 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5387 */
5388int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5389
5390/**
5391 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5392 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5393 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5394 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5395 *
5396 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5397 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5398 * can be called from any context.
5399 */
5400void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5401                                     u16 tid);
5402
5403/**
5404 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5405 *
5406 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5407 * @addr: station's address
5408 *
5409 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5410 *
5411 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5412 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5413 */
5414struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5415                                         const u8 *addr);
5416
5417/**
5418 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5419 *
5420 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5421 * @addr: remote station's address
5422 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5423 *
5424 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5425 *
5426 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5427 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5428 *
5429 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5430 *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5431 *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5432 *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5433 *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5434 *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5435 *      is not reliable.
5436 *
5437 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5438 */
5439struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5440                                               const u8 *addr,
5441                                               const u8 *localaddr);
5442
5443/**
5444 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5445 * @hw: the hardware
5446 * @pubsta: the station
5447 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5448 *
5449 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5450 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5451 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5452 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5453 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5454 *
5455 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5456 * manner.
5457 *
5458 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5459 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5460 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5461 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5462 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5463 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5464 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5465 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5466 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5467 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5468 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5469 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5470 * woke up while blocked or not.
5471 */
5472void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5473                               struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5474
5475/**
5476 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5477 * @pubsta: the station
5478 *
5479 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5480 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5481 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5482 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5483 *
5484 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5485 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5486 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5487 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5488 *
5489 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5490 *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5491 *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5492 *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5493 */
5494void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5495
5496/**
5497 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5498 * @pubsta: the station
5499 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5500 *
5501 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5502 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5503 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5504 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5505 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5506 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5507 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5508 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5509 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5510 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5511 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5512 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5513 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5514 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5515 */
5516void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5517
5518/**
5519 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5520 *
5521 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5522 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5523 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5524 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5525 *
5526 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5527 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5528 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5529 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5530 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5531 * attempts.
5532 *
5533 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5534 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5535 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5536 * them to 0.
5537 *
5538 * @pubsta: the station
5539 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5540 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5541 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5542 */
5543void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5544                                    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5545
5546/**
5547 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5548 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5549 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5550 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5551 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5552 *
5553 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5554 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5555 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5556 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5557 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5558 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5559 *
5560 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5561 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5562 * set_key callback.
5563 */
5564void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5565                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5566                         void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5567                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5568                                      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5569                                      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5570                                      void *data),
5571                         void *iter_data);
5572
5573/**
5574 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5575 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5576 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5577 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5578 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5579 *
5580 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5581 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5582 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5583 * in removal process will be skipped.
5584 *
5585 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5586 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5587 */
5588void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5589                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5590                             void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5591                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5592                                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5593                                          struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5594                                          void *data),
5595                             void *iter_data);
5596
5597/**
5598 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5599 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5600 * @iter: iterator function
5601 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5602 *
5603 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5604 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5605 * places while calling into the driver.
5606 *
5607 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5608 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5609 * removed.
5610 *
5611 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5612 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5613 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5614 * or not.
5615 */
5616void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5617        struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5618        void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5619                     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5620                     void *data),
5621        void *iter_data);
5622
5623/**
5624 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5625 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5626 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5627 *
5628 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5629 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5630 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5631 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5632 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5633 * %NULL.
5634 *
5635 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5636 */
5637struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5638                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5639
5640/**
5641 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5642 *
5643 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5644 *
5645 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5646 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5647 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5648 */
5649void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5650
5651/**
5652 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5653 *
5654 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5655 *
5656 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5657 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5658 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5659 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5660 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5661 *
5662 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5663 * without connection recovery attempts.
5664 */
5665void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5666
5667/**
5668 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5669 *
5670 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5671 *
5672 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5673 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5674 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5675 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5676 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5677 *
5678 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5679 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5680 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5681 * disconnect normally later.
5682 *
5683 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5684 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5685 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5686 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5687 */
5688void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5689
5690/**
5691 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5692 *      rssi threshold triggered
5693 *
5694 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5695 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5696 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5697 * @gfp: context flags
5698 *
5699 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5700 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5701 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5702 */
5703void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5704                               enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5705                               s32 rssi_level,
5706                               gfp_t gfp);
5707
5708/**
5709 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5710 *
5711 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5712 * @gfp: context flags
5713 */
5714void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5715
5716/**
5717 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5718 *
5719 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5720 */
5721void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5722
5723/**
5724 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5725 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5726 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5727 *
5728 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5729 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5730 */
5731void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5732
5733/**
5734 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5735 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5736 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5737 *
5738 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5739 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5740 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5741 */
5742void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5743                            enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5744
5745/**
5746 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5747 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5748 */
5749void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5750
5751/**
5752 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5753 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5754 */
5755void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5756
5757/**
5758 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5759 *
5760 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5761 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5762 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5763 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5764 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5765 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5766 *
5767 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5768 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5769 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5770 */
5771void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5772                                  const u8 *addr);
5773
5774/**
5775 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5776 * @pubsta: station struct
5777 * @tid: the session's TID
5778 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5779 *      assumed to be out of the window after the call
5780 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5781 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5782 *
5783 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5784 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5785 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5786 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5787 */
5788void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5789                                          u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5790                                          u16 received_mpdus);
5791
5792/**
5793 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5794 *
5795 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5796 * buffer.
5797 *
5798 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5799 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5800 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5801 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5802 */
5803void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5804
5805/**
5806 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5807 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5808 * @addr: station mac address
5809 * @tid: the rx tid
5810 */
5811void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5812                                 unsigned int tid);
5813
5814/**
5815 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5816 *
5817 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5818 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5819 * reordering.
5820 *
5821 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5822 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5823 *
5824 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5825 * @addr: station mac address
5826 * @tid: the rx tid
5827 */
5828static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5829                                                      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5830{
5831        if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5832                return;
5833        ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5834}
5835
5836/**
5837 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5838 *
5839 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5840 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5841 * reordering.
5842 *
5843 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5844 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5845 *
5846 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5847 * @addr: station mac address
5848 * @tid: the rx tid
5849 */
5850static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5851                                                     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5852{
5853        if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5854                return;
5855        ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5856}
5857
5858/**
5859 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5860 *
5861 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5862 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5863 *
5864 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5865 *
5866 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5867 * @addr: station mac address
5868 * @tid: the rx tid
5869 */
5870void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5871                                   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5872
5873/* Rate control API */
5874
5875/**
5876 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5877 *
5878 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5879 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5880 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5881 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5882 *      to be filled in
5883 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5884 *      which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5885 *      used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5886 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5887 *      RTS threshold
5888 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5889 *      if the selected rate supports it
5890 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5891 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5892 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5893 */
5894struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5895        struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5896        struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5897        struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5898        struct sk_buff *skb;
5899        struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5900        bool rts, short_preamble;
5901        u32 rate_idx_mask;
5902        u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5903        bool bss;
5904};
5905
5906/**
5907 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5908 */
5909enum rate_control_capabilities {
5910        /**
5911         * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5912         * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5913         * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5914         * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5915         * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5916         */
5917        RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5918};
5919
5920struct rate_control_ops {
5921        unsigned long capa;
5922        const char *name;
5923        void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5924        void (*free)(void *priv);
5925
5926        void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5927        void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5928                          struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5929                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5930        void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5931                            struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5932                            struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5933                            u32 changed);
5934        void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5935                         void *priv_sta);
5936
5937        void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5938                              struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5939                              void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5940        void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5941                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5942                          struct sk_buff *skb);
5943        void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5944                         struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5945
5946        void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5947                                struct dentry *dir);
5948        void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
5949
5950        u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
5951};
5952
5953static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5954                                 enum nl80211_band band,
5955                                 int index)
5956{
5957        return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5958}
5959
5960static inline s8
5961rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5962                  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5963{
5964        int i;
5965
5966        for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5967                if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5968                        return i;
5969
5970        /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
5971        WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
5972
5973        /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
5974        return 0;
5975}
5976
5977static inline
5978bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5979                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5980{
5981        unsigned int i;
5982
5983        for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5984                if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5985                        return true;
5986        return false;
5987}
5988
5989/**
5990 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5991 *
5992 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5993 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5994 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5995 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5996 *
5997 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5998 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5999 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6000 */
6001int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6002                           struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6003                           struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6004
6005int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6006void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6007
6008static inline bool
6009conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6010{
6011        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6012}
6013
6014static inline bool
6015conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6016{
6017        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6018               conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6019}
6020
6021static inline bool
6022conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6023{
6024        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6025               conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6026}
6027
6028static inline bool
6029conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6030{
6031        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6032}
6033
6034static inline bool
6035conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6036{
6037        return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6038                (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6039                (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6040}
6041
6042static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6043ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6044{
6045        if (p2p) {
6046                switch (type) {
6047                case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6048                        return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6049                case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6050                        return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6051                default:
6052                        break;
6053                }
6054        }
6055        return type;
6056}
6057
6058static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6059ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6060{
6061        return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6062}
6063
6064/**
6065 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6066 *
6067 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6068 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6069 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6070 *
6071 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6072 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6073 * matching GroupId management frame.
6074 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6075 */
6076void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6077                                const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6078
6079void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6080                                   int rssi_min_thold,
6081                                   int rssi_max_thold);
6082
6083void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6084
6085/**
6086 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6087 *
6088 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6089 *
6090 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6091 *
6092 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6093 * applicable.
6094 */
6095int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6096
6097/**
6098 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6099 * @vif: virtual interface
6100 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6101 * @gfp: allocation flags
6102 *
6103 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6104 */
6105void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6106                                    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6107                                    gfp_t gfp);
6108
6109/**
6110 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6111 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6112 * @vif: virtual interface
6113 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6114 * @band: the band to transmit on
6115 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6116 *
6117 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6118 */
6119bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6120                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6121                              int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6122
6123/**
6124 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6125 *
6126 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6127 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6128 *
6129 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6130 *
6131 * private:
6132 *
6133 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6134 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6135 */
6136struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6137        u32 next_tsf;
6138        bool has_next_tsf;
6139
6140        u8 absent;
6141
6142        u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6143        struct {
6144                u32 start;
6145                u32 duration;
6146                u32 interval;
6147        } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6148};
6149
6150/**
6151 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6152 *
6153 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6154 * @data: NoA tracking data
6155 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6156 *
6157 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6158 */
6159int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6160                            struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6161
6162/**
6163 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6164 *
6165 * @data: NoA tracking data
6166 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6167 */
6168void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6169
6170/**
6171 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6172 * @vif: virtual interface
6173 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6174 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6175 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6176 * @gfp: allocation flags
6177 *
6178 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6179 */
6180void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6181                                 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6182                                 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6183
6184/**
6185 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6186 *
6187 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6188 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6189 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6190 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6191 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6192 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6193 *
6194 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6195 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6196 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6197 *
6198 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6199 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6200 *
6201 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6202 */
6203int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6204
6205/**
6206 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6207 *
6208 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6209 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6210 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6211 *
6212 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6213 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6214 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6215 *
6216 * @sta: the station
6217 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6218 */
6219void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6220
6221/**
6222 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6223 *
6224 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6225 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6226 *      ieee80211_next_txq()
6227 *
6228 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6229 *
6230 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6231 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6232 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6233 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6234 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6235 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6236 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6237 */
6238struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6239                                     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6240
6241/**
6242 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6243 *
6244 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6245 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6246 *
6247 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6248 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6249 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6250 */
6251struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6252
6253/**
6254 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6255 *
6256 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6257 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6258 *
6259 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6260 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6261 */
6262void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6263
6264/* (deprecated) */
6265static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6266{
6267}
6268
6269void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6270                              struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6271
6272/**
6273 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6274 *
6275 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6276 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6277 *
6278 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6279 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6280 *
6281 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6282 * this TXQ internally.
6283 */
6284static inline void
6285ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6286{
6287        __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6288}
6289
6290/**
6291 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6292 *
6293 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6294 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6295 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6296 *
6297 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6298 * internally.
6299 */
6300static inline void
6301ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6302                     bool force)
6303{
6304        __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6305}
6306
6307/**
6308 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6309 *
6310 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6311 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6312 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6313 * next_txq().
6314 *
6315 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6316 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6317 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6318 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6319 * again.
6320 *
6321 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6322 * aligned aginst driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6323 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6324 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6325 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6326 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6327 *
6328 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6329 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6330 */
6331bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6332                                struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6333
6334/**
6335 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6336 *
6337 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6338 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6339 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6340 *
6341 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6342 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6343 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6344 */
6345void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6346                             unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6347                             unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6348
6349/**
6350 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6351 *
6352 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6353 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6354 *
6355 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6356 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6357 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6358 * @gfp: allocation flags
6359 */
6360void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6361                                   u8 inst_id,
6362                                   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6363                                   gfp_t gfp);
6364
6365/**
6366 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6367 *
6368 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6369 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6370 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6371 *
6372 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6373 * @match: match event information
6374 * @gfp: allocation flags
6375 */
6376void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6377                              struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6378                              gfp_t gfp);
6379
6380#endif /* MAC80211_H */
6381